ENGLISH GW550 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ELECTRONICS INC. www.lgmobile.com P/N : MMBB0359220 (1.0) GW550 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺑﻲ ENGLISH ﻋﺮﺑﻲ GW550 User Guide www.lgmobile.com P/N : MMBB0359220 (1.
Bluetooth QD ID B015930
GW550 User Guide This document is the user guide for the LG GW550 Windows Mobile Smartphone. All rights for this document are reserved by LG Electronics. Copying, modifying and distributing this document without the consent of LG Electronics are prohibited.
Contents Introduction ..............................6 GW550 Features .......................7 Phone Components ................................ 7 Keys and Parts Functions ....................... 8 Getting Started .......................10 Installing the SIM card and Battery ........10 Battery ................................................10 SIM Card.............................................11 Charging the Battery ............................12 microSD Card ......................................
Contents E-mail .................................................30 View Timers ........................................30 Delete .................................................30 Delete List ...........................................31 Filter ...................................................31 Video Call............................................31 Messaging ..............................32 Messaging .............................................32 Text Message .......................................
Contents Synchronizing Musics, Videos, and Pictures ..............................................58 Internet Sharing .....................................59 Bluetooth Manager ................................59 To Set the Bluetooth Configuration ........59 To Make Your Device Discoverable ........60 Bluetooth Partnership ..........................60 To Accept a Bluetooth Partnership ........61 Services ..............................................61 Settings Page ......................................
Contents Settings ..................................77 Phone ....................................................77 Auto Answer........................................77 Band Switch ........................................77 Call Barring .........................................77 Call Forwarding ...................................77 Call Options.........................................77 Call Waiting .........................................78 Caller ID ..............................................
Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of this LG GW550 Windows Mobile Smartphone. This user guide contains information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent damage or misuse of the phone. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user guide could void your warranty for this equipment.
GW550 Features Phone Components 1. Phone button 12. Earpiece 2. Proximity Sensor 13. Camera 3. Display screen 4. Home key 14. Navigation key 15. Right soft key 16. End key 17. Back key 5. Left soft key 6. Call key 7. Enter key 18. Enter key 19. Smart E-mail key 20. Smart Contacts key 21. Smart Applications key 8. Messaging key 9. Microphone 22. Camera 10. Speakers 23. Battery Compartment SD OPEN micro LOCK 11. microSD Card Holder 24.
GW550 Features Keys and Parts Functions 1. Phone button bLong press to turn the phone on or off. bShort press to display Quick List. Quick List allows you to turn off or lock the keyboard of your device, provides shortcut access to Task Manager or Wireless Manager, or allows you to change profiles. 2. Proximity Sensor 3. Display screen 4. Home key: Press to return to the Today screen. 5. Left soft key: Press to perform the function indicated by the text on the display above it. 6.
GW550 Features Volume Keys bWhen the screen is idle, press to adjust system volume. bDuring a call, press to adjust the in-call volume. USB Connector Use to connect the charger, earphone, or USB cable to synchronize with a computer. Camera Key Press to activate the camera and take photos or videos. How to hold your phone In order to allow better RF antenna sensitivity, LG suggests that you hold the handset as depicted in the figure below.
Getting Started Installing the SIM card and Battery Always turn off your phone and disconnect it from the charger and other accessories before installing or replacing the SIM card, microSD card, and battery. To remove the back cover 1. Place three fingers on the back cover and your thumb on the front panel. 2. Push the front panel with your thumb and slide the back cover off with the three fingers. Battery Your phone comes with a rechargeable Li-ion battery. To remove the battery 1. Turn the phone off. 2.
Getting Started SIM Card Your SIM card contains your phone number, subscription details, and contacts and must be inserted into your handset. To install the SIM card Insert the SIM card with the metal contacts facing down and the cut-off corner on the top-right side. To remove the SIM card Note The SIM card and its contacts can be easily damaged by scratching and bending the card. Be careful when installing and removing the card. Refer to the instructions supplied with the SIM card.
Getting Started To replace the back cover 1. Align the back cover (A). 2. Push the back cover to lock into place (B). B A Charging the Battery 1. Make sure the battery is installed inside the battery compartment. 2. Plug the power adaptor into a wall outlet. 3. Flip open the USB connector’s cover of the phone. 4. Connect the power adaptor into the USB connector of your phone. 12 Battery Indicators When the phone is turned on... icon indicates that the battery bThe is charging.
Getting Started CAUTION! bDo not remove the battery or the SIM card while charging. bThere is a risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Replace only with batteries approved by the manufacturer. bDispose of used batteries according to the local regulations in your area. bDo not force the mini USB connector as this may damage the phone or the cable. microSD Card For additional storage space for your photos, videos, music and files, install a microSD card into your phone.
Getting Started B A To remove the microSD card 1. Turn the phone off. 2. Push the microSD card slot to release lock. 3. Flip up the slot. 4. Slide out the microSD card from the slot. 5. Flip down then push the slot to lock. Info! C D OP LO OP LO 14 CK EN CK EN E The microSD card is an optional accessory and is not included in your package. Contact your retailer to purchase one. bAvoid using the microSD card when the battery is low. bThe card is designed to fit easily into the slot.
Getting Started Turn the Device On and Off Adjust Volume To turn on the device, press and hold the Power button located on top of the device. To turn off the device: • Press the Power button and select Power off. • Press and hold the Power button. Your device has two types of volume: bSystem Volume: Adjust the system volume to change the volume level of system sounds and notifications like alarm, ringer, keypad, audio and video playback. Lock the Keyboard To lock the keyboard, press and hold the End key.
Screen Information The Today Screen From the home screen, you can quickly check your schedule, and see at a glance any missed calls or new messages. Default Today Screen Status Indicators Service Provider’s Name Date and Time Wi-Fi Status Shortcut menu Scroll down to view more shortcut menu. Highlight a menu to expand to more shortcuts. Contacts Start menu (Left soft key function) (Right soft key function) bPress the left soft key bPress the right soft key to access menu. to access Contacts.
Screen Information Status Indicators The following are some of the status icons that you may see on your device.
Screen Information Shortcut Menu The shortcut menu displays notifications or other information of each menu item. By default the following applications are displayed: Menu Description Calls and Messages Notification Displays notifications about recent voice and video calls, voicemail, and other messages. To access a submenu, use the navigation keys to scroll, then press the Enter key. Appointments Displays upcoming schedules and allows you to set appointments.
Screen Information Start Menu The Start menu contains all the programs installed on your device. bTo access a menu, use the navigation keys to highlight the item, then press the Enter key. Accessing the Start menu bFrom the Home screen, press the left soft key Start to access the Start menu. bBy default, the Recent Programs screen is displayed. To view other programs, press the left soft key All Programs. bTo go to the next screen display, press the left soft key More.
Screen Information Icon 20 Program Description Messaging Send and receive e-mail and text messages. Calendar Schedule appointments and set alarm notifications. Contacts Lets you store names, phone numbers, e-mail and other information. Internet Explorer Browse the web and download files from the Internet. Tasks Keeps track of your tasks. ActiveSync Synchronizes information between your device and a computer. Call History Displays the list of missed, received or placed calls.
Screen Information Icon Program Description Microsoft My Phone Synchronizes information on your device with your My Phone account at http://myphone.microsoft.com. Adobe Reader LE View *.pdf files on your device. AGPS Settings Enable Assisted Global Positioning System. Brightness Control the level of brightness when using the battery or external power. Bluetooth Connect with other Bluetooth devices and create a network. Camera Capture photos and record videos.
Screen Information Icon 22 Program Description Clock & Alarm Allows you to set the date and time and set alarms. MSN Money Access MSN Money to view stocks. MSN Weather View the weather forecast via MSN Weather. Search Widget Provides access to Live Search. Speed Dial Allows you to add phone numbers for speed dial. XT9 Dictionaries Allows you to set the language of the dictionary and enable functions such as word completion, next word prediction and others.
Entering Information Using the Keyboard QWERTY Keyboard bTo enter a single symbol or number printed at the top of keys, press Fn then press the corresponding key. To enter various symbols or numbers, press and hold Fn then press the corresponding keys. To switch back to text mode, press Fn again. To enter the symbols that are not shown on the keypad, press then select the desired symbol. bPress to go to the next line. bPress to erase a character.
Entering Information XT9 Mode Numeric Keypad XT9 predicts words and suggests spellings as you type the first few characters, so you can just select the word you want. To activate XT9 mode, press Fn + spacebar and select XT9 English. To enter text using XT9 1. Type the first few characters of the word. 2. As you type, the dictionary displays predicted words below the word you are typing. 3. Scroll left or right to highlight the word then press the Enter key to select.
Contacts Contacts Contacts is your address book and information storage for the people you communicate with. You can store phone numbers, e-mail addresses, home addresses, and other information that relates to a contact. You can also add a picture or assign a ringtone to a contact. Your device supports two types of contacts: Outlook and SIM Contacts. Outlook Contact Contacts are stored in the device memory. If you use Outlook on your PC, you can synchronize contacts between your device and the PC.
Contacts To Work with the Contact List To Delete a Contact There are several ways to use and synchronise the contact list. Here are a few tips: 1. From the Today screen, select Contacts. 2. In the contact list, do any of the following: bIn Name view, you can search for a contact by entering a name or by using the alphabetical index. To switch to Name view, select Menu > View By > Name. bTo see a summary of information about a contact, select the contact.
Call Making a Voice Call Calling is easy with the smart dial feature. If you press a number on the keypad, the screen displays the phone numbers in your Call History, starting with the number you enter. You can then select the number you want to call. Make a Call from Phone To make a call, enter the phone number you wish to call, including the area code, and press the Call key . For international calls, press and hold “0” to add the + character that replaces the international access code.
Call To Create a Speed Dial Entry Receiving a Call 1. From the Today screen, select Contacts. 2. Highlight the contact, then press the Enter key. 3. Select Menu > Add to Speed Dial. 4. In the Keypad Assignment box, select the desired number. 5. Select Done to save. When you receive an incoming call, a message will appear and the device will ring if the ring volume is turned on. Note bKey 1 is generally assigned to your voice mail, and Speed Dial will designate the next available key by default.
Call Note Not all service providers support conference call. Contact your service provider for details. To Turn the Speakerphone On or Off The speakerphone allows users to talk hands-free or allows other people to listen to the conversation. bDuring a conversation, select Menu > Speakerphone On. The speakerphone icon appear on the status indicators area. bTo turn off the speakerphone, select Menu > Speakerphone Off. bDuring a conversation, select Menu > Mute. The microphone off icon appears on the screen.
Call To End a Video Call bTo end an incoming or outgoing video call, . press the End key Notes 1. Video call service is only available in 3G coverage areas. 2. The video call will be terminated in the following cases: When you accept a 3rd party, Conference Call, or a 2nd incoming call. When the voice call is placed on hold. When the voice call is disconnected. When moving out of a 3G service area. When the network connection is in poor state.
Call Delete List To empty the call history list, select Menu > Delete List. Filter bNo Filter: Allows you to view missed, received, and dialed call records. bMissed Calls: Allows you to view the calls which you have not answered. bIncoming Calls: Allows you to view the calls that you have answered. bOutgoing Calls: Allows you to view the calls that you have dialed. Video Call 1. Select the number to make a video call from the list. 2. Select Menu > Video Call.
Messaging Messaging To Open the Messaging screen bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Messaging. You can send and receive text messages, multimedia messages, audio messages, and email messagse. To create an SMS message 1. From the Messaging screen, select Text Message. 2. Select Menu > New > SMS. 3. On the To field, enter the recipient’s phone number or add a recipient from Contacts. TIP! Text Message You can write, edit, and view the text messages.
Messaging To create an MMS message To reply or forward a text message 1. From the Messaging screen, select Text Message. 2. Select Menu > New > MMS. 3. On the To field, enter the recipient’s phone number. 4. Enter the Subject for the message. 5. Select Insert Text to enter the text of the message, and select Insert Picture/ Video or Insert Audio to add media objects. To capture a new image or record a new sound clip for the message, select Menu > Capture. 6.
Messaging To Set up an E-mail Accont 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Messaging. 2. Select Setup E-mail. 3. Enter your E-mail address and Password then select Next. Note Select the Save Password box to allow the phone to remember your password so you do not have to enter it again. 4. Auto setup attempts to download necessary e-mail server settings so that you do not have to set them manually. Once finished, select Next. 5.
Messaging To create and send a new e-mail 1. From the Messaging screen, select the e-mail account. 2. Select Menu > New. 3. On To, enter the recipient’s e-mail address. TIP! bTo add Bcc and Cc recipients, use the navigation key up to view and scroll the screen’s the top page. 4. Enter the Subject. 5. Compose your message. 6. When finished, select Send. Note bYou will be alerted when you have received messages. bReceived messages are stored in the Inbox.
Messaging Receiving Messages The manner in which you receive messages depends on the type of the account you have: • To send and receive e-mail for an Outlook E-mail account, begin synchronization with Exchange Server through ActiveSync. • To send and receive an Internet e-mail account, download messages through a remote e-mail server. • Text messages are automatically received when your phone is turned on.
Messaging My e-mail My e-mail connects you to your online world while on the go with your phone. Once you choose “Setup Now”, My e-mail will prompt you for your username and password to your favorite Internet destinations. You have the option to choose one or more sites either now or in the future, and My e-mail will automatically deliver new information form those sites to your phone. Smart Email You can add the email address you frequently use in Smart Email.
Multimedia Camera Taking a Photo 1. Select Start > Camera or press the Camera key to activate the camera capture mode. Zoom White Balance Photo Mode Remaining shots Memory Resolution bTo send the image via MMS or e-mail, select Menu > Send. bTo delete the image, select Menu > Delete. 3. The captured image is automatically saved in the My Pictures folder. To view images in the folder, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 4. To close the camera, select Menu > Exit. Recording a Video 1.
Multimedia 4. Do either of the following: bTo capture more images, select Back. bTo play the video, select Menu > Play. bTo send the video via MMS, select Menu > Send. bTo delete the video, select Menu > Delete. 3. The recorded video is automatically saved in the My Videos folder. To play videos in the folder, select Start > File Explorer > My Videos, then select the desired video file to play. Videos are played using the Windows Media Player application. 4. To close the camera, select Menu > Exit.
Multimedia Capture Mode Settings On the capture screen, select Options to view and adjust capture mode settings. Choosing Capture Mode Type Use the navigation up and down keys then Enter key to select a capture mode type: bPhoto: Select to capture still images. This is the default capture mode. bTimer: Select to enable timer mode. bBurst: Select to capture three or five continuous shots. bFrame: Select to choose from the predefined frames and add it to your images.
Multimedia Pictures & Videos The Pictures & Videos application collects, organizes, and sorts images and video clips on your device or the storage card. You can view the pictures as a slide show, beam or send them via e-mail, edit them, or set them as the background on the Today screen. To Copy a Picture or Video Clip to Your Device You can copy pictures from your PC and view them on your device. bCopy the pictures from your PC or a storage card to the My Pictures folder on your device.
Multimedia To View Slide Show To Delete a Picture or Video Clip bFrom the My Pictures folder screen or while viewing a picture, select Menu > Play Slide Show. bTo stop slide show, press the back key . 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 2. Highlight a picture or video clip then select Menu > Delete. 3. Select Yes to confirm the deletion. To Play Videos with Audio To Edit a Picture 1.
Multimedia To Set a Picture as the Today Screen Background bAuto Correct: To adjust the brightness and contrast levels of the picture. Note bTo undo an edit, select Menu > Undo. bTo cancel all unsaved edits you made to the picture, press then select Yes to confirm. You can use a picture as the background on the Today screen. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 2. Select the picture you want to set as background. 3. Select Menu > Use as Home Screen. 4.
Multimedia To Send Pictures and Video Clips via E-mail or MMS You can send pictures and video clips to other devices via e-mail. 1. First, set up Messaging to send and receive e-mail messages. 2. From the Today screen, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 3. Highlight the picture or video clip you want to send. 4. Select Menu > Send, then select the messaging account (such as Outlook E-mail or MMS) to send the attached item. 5. A new message is created with the item attached. 6.
Multimedia To Use Advance Options 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Pictures & Videos. 2. Select the picture for which you want to configure settings. 3. Select Menu > Options. The Options screen appears, allow you to: bResize a picture so that you can send it faster via e-mail. bConfigure the rotation setting. bConfigure the view settings during slide shows.
Multimedia Playback Screen This is the default screen that displays the playback controls, the album art window, and the video window. You can change the appearance of this screen by choosing a different skin. When you are viewing the Playback screen, the following commands appear on the Menu. bOptions: Lets you adjust various Windows Media Player options, including network, skin, and hardware button options. bProperties: Displays information about the currently playing file.
Multimedia Now Playing Screen Library Screen The screen that displays the Now Playing playlist. This special playlist indicates the currently playing file and any files that are “queued up” to play next. When you are viewing the Now Playing screen, the following commands appear on the Menu. The Library screen lets you quickly find your audio files, video files, and playlists. It contains categories such as My Music, My Videos, My TV, My Playlists and Now Playing.
Multimedia When you are viewing the Library screen, the following commands appear on the Menu. bQueue Up: Adds the selected item to the end of the current Now Playing playlist. bDelete from Library: Deletes the selected item from the library. bNow Playing: Displays the Now Playing screen. bLibrary: Displays the Library screen so you can choose a file to play. bUpdate Library: Adds new items to the library by searching your device or storage card.
Multimedia 3. Select Channel to tune in to a preset station. When no preset channel is available, execute Auto Scan. 4. To close radio, select Menu > Exit. To Use Radio Options From the FM Radio screen, select Menu and choose any of the following options: bListen Via: Allows you to select to listen to the radio via Wired HeadSet, Speaker. bEdit: Allows you to edit the station set on a channel. bAdd New: Allows you to add a new channel. bStation Info On / Off: Enable or disable station information display.
Applications Internet Explorer With Internet Explorer you can view web sites and surf the Internet on your device just like you do on a computer. From the Today screen, select Start > Internet Explorer. In the address bar, enter the web address you want to visit or choose from previously entered addresses from Favorites or History. Press the left or right soft key to display the function bar. You can do the following by selecting Menu.
Applications To zoom the page bSelect Zoom then use the up and down navigation keys to zoom in or out the web page. Note bBrowsing the internet may incur additional charges. Charges vary depending on the type of connection (i.e. GPRS, ActiveSync, or WiFi). Please contact your network operator for further information. Windows Live™ With the pre-installed Windows Live™ on your device, you can access Hotmail, search the web and synchronize your Contacts. To Set Up Windows Live™ 1.
Applications Windows Live™ Contacts After setting up Windows Live™, you can synchronize Contacts to your device. To add Windows Live™ contacts 1. From the Today screen, select Contacts > New. 2. Select Windows Live. 3. Enter the contact information, in the Email field, enter the e-mail address. 4. When finished, select Done. Using Windows Live™ Search 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Windows Live. 2. Enter the word(s) to search on the search bar, then press the Enter key. 3.
Applications bSelect which types of information are synchronized and specify how much information is synchronized. For example, you can choose how many weeks of past Calendar appointments to synchronize. Install ActiveSync on your PC. Once ActiveSync is installed, you can synchronize your device with the PC. You can download ActiveSync from the Microsoft’s website (http://www.microsoft.com) and install it on your PC.
Applications Note bChoose Connect without setting up your device if you only want to transfer media files, check for updates, and explore your device but not sync Outlook information. bSelect the items you want to synchronize, then click Next. bEnter a device name and click Set Up. When you finish the setup wizard, Windows Mobile Device Center synchronizes your device automatically. Notice that Outlook e-mails and other information will appear on your device after synchronization.
Applications bThe Synchronization Setup Wizard automatically starts and guides you to create a synchronization relationship. Click Next to proceed. bTo synchronize your device with your computer, clear the Synchronize directly with a server running Microsoft Exchange Server check box, and then click Next. bSelect the information types that you want to synchronize, and then click Next. bClick Finish. When you finish the wizard, ActiveSync synchronizes your device automatically.
Applications Location New state PC1 All Outlook contacts and calendar appointments that were on PC2 are now also on PC1. PC2 All Outlook contacts and calendar appointments that were on PC1 are now also on PC2. Device All Outlook contacts and calendar appointments from both PC1 and PC2 are on the device. To start and stop synchronization bTo synchronize Outlook information and other local information on the PC, including media files, connect your device to the PC using Bluetooth or a cable.
Applications To synchronize directly with Exchange Server You can set up synchronization with Exchange Server on your device, if it is available to you through your company or wireless service provider. However, you should first ask your administrator for the following information and then carry on with the steps: e-mail address, Exchange Server address, user name, password, and domain name. 1. In ActiveSync on the device, select Menu > Configure Server.
Applications 58 Synchronizing Musics, Videos, and Pictures Change Media synchronization settings If you want to carry your music or other digital media with you along while you travel, ActiveSync works with Windows Media Player to synchronize music, video, and pictures. Other than selecting the Media information type in ActiveSync to be synchronized, all media synchronization settings must be set in Windows Media Player.
Applications Internet Sharing Bluetooth Manager You can set up your PC to connect to the Internet using the Internet connection on your device. Bluetooth enables compatible mobile devices, peripherals and computers that are in close proximity to communicate directly with each other without wires. Your device supports built-in Bluetooth connectivity, which makes it possible to connect it with compatible Bluetooth headsets, computer applications and so on. Note bActiveSync software version 4.
Applications To Make Your Device Discoverable 1. From the Settings page, highlight Not Discoverable then press the Enter key. 2. Select visibility option (Always Visible, Visible for 60 seconds, Not Visible). 3. Select Done. Bluetooth Partnership Note bIf you use a PC Sync via Bluetooth, you can exchange data within Contacts. bWhen you receive data from another Bluetooth device, the device requests a confirmation. After confirming the transfer, the file will be copied to your device.
Applications To create a Bluetooth Partnership To Accept a Bluetooth Partnership 1. From the Settings page, select Add a device. 2. To limit the search, select the type of device you want to establish connection with. 1. Ensure that the Bluetooth is turned on. 2. When prompted, enter a passkey (the same passkey that is entered on the device requesting the partnership) to establish a secure connection. 3. Select OK.
Applications Settings Page Accessories Page From the Settings page, the following options are available: bAdd a Device: Select to set up a new Bluetooth partnership. bDisable Bluetooth: Turns Bluetooth off. bLG-GW550: The default device name as seen by other Bluetooth devices. Select this option to change the name. bNot Discoverable/Discoverable: Select this option to set visibility status of your device.
Applications Office Mobile Excel Mobile Excel Mobile makes it easy for you to open and edit Excel workbooks and templates created on your PC. To open an Excel file 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Office Mobile > Excel Mobile. 2. Locate the Excel file, then select Select. To change view options, select View. For other functions, select Menu. bClose File: Select to close the file and exit Excel Mobile. bEdit: Select this option to edit the opened file.
Applications bFormulas and functions. If an Excel file contains a function that is not supported by Excel Mobile, the function is removed, and only the returned value of the function appears. The following formulas are also converted to values: formulas entered as an array or containing an array argument, for example, =SUM({1;2;3;4}); formulas containing external link references or an intersection range reference; and formulas containing references past row 16384 are replaced with #REF! bProtection settings.
Applications macro sheets, and dialog sheets are removed and replaced with a place holder sheet; text boxes, drawing objects, pictures, lists, conditional formats, and controls are removed; pivot table data is converted to values. OneNote Mobile OneNote Mobile allows you to create notes with added pictures and recordings. To create a new note 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Office Mobile > OneNote Mobile. 2. Select New. 3. Compose your note. 4. When finished, select Done.
Applications To start a slide show presentation To zoom the slide show 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile. 2. Locate the the slide show you want to view, then select Select. If the presentation is set up as a timed slide show, slides will advance automatically. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Office Mobile > PowerPoint Mobile. 2. Open the presentation. 3. Select Menu > Zoom In or Zoom Out.
Applications • Backgrounds • Shapes and text boxes • Artistic page borders • Smart tags • Metafiles bBi-directional text. While Word Mobile will open documents containing bi-directional text, the indentations and alignment may be displayed and saved incorrectly. bPassword-protected files. Word Mobile does not support opening passwordprotected documents. You must first remove the password protection in Word on the PC if you want to view the document on the device. bDocument protection.
Applications Adobe Reader LE Adobe Reader® LE is an application for viewing PDF (Portable Document Format) files on your device. 5. You can change the way programs are viewed or ordered by selecting Menu > View or Sort by. 6. To close Task Manager, select Menu > Exit. To open a PDF file 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Adobe Reader LE. 2. Browse for the PDF file you want to open, then select Open. 3. To zoom the file, select Tools > Zoom. 4. To close the application, select Menu > Exit.
Applications Note bBefore accessing MSN Weather, make sure your device has a GPRS SIM card installed. bAdditional costs may be incurred when using this service. Java Your device supports Java and hence you can easily download java games and other java applications from the internet. Note bAdditional costs may be incurred when using this service. GPS Accelerator Allows you to download GPS data and to enhance GPS peroformance.
Applications Microsoft My Phone Remote Desktop Microsoft® My Phone synchronizes your phone’s contacts, calendar, tasks, text messages, music, photos, videos, and other documents with your My Phone account at http://myphone.microsoft.com. Remote Desktop provides remote access to the desktop of your computer running Windows XP Professional, from your device.
Applications To Update RSS Feeds 1. Highlight the folder or channel then press the Enter key. A check mark appears on the folder / channel box. 2. Select Menu > Update to start updating. To View RSS Feeds 1. Highlight the channel then select View. 2. Highlight the news feed you want to view from the list. 3. Press the Enter key to view the rest of the story. 4. You can view the next or previous news feed on the list by selecting Menu > Next or Previous. 5.
Applications bIf you want to see the files or folders in the My device or Storage Card folder, select either of the two. bTo view the files or folders in the phone’s memory, highlight the files or folders that you want to view, then press the Enter key. bSelect the folder category (labelled My Documents by default) and then the folder that you want to view. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Voice Notes. 2. Highlight the recording from the list. 3. Select Menu > Rename to rename the file. 4.
Applications To Change your Default Calendar View To Change the Priority of a Task 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Calendar. 2. Select Menu > Day View / Week View / Month View / Agenda View. Before you can sort tasks by priority, you need to specify a priority level for each task. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Tasks. 2. Select the desired task, then select Edit. 3. In the Priority box, select a priority level. 4. Select Done to return to the task list.
Applications To Show Start and Due Dates in the Task List Calculator 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Tasks. 2. Select Menu > Options. 3. Check the Show start and due dates box. 4. Select Done to return to the task list. The calculator function allows you to add, subtract, multiply and divide. You can input numbers using the number keys, and input operators using button keys. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Accessories > Calculator.
Applications Games In the Games submenu, Windows games like Bubble Breaker and Solitaire, have been already been pre-installed on your device. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Games, then select the desired game. XT9 Dictionaries The XT9 Dictionaries allows you to add your own words into the My Words XT9 dictionary. It also allows you to configure automatic substitution. To add a word in XT9 1. From the Today screen, select Start > XT9 Dictionaries. 2. Select My Words XT9, then press the Enter key.
Applications To add auto-substitution shortcut 1. From the Today screen, select Start > XT9 Dictionaries. 2. Select Auto-Substitution XT9, then press the Enter key. 3. To add a shortcut, select Add. 4. Type the shortcut word and the word to substitute, then select Done. To edit auto-substitution shortcut 1. From the Today screen, select Start > XT9 Dictionaries. 2. Select Auto-Substitution XT9, then press the Enter key. 3. Highlight the word to edit, then select Menu > Edit. 4.
Settings To configure the settings on your device, from the Today screen, select Start > Settings, then select the settings category. Call barring affects all voice and data calls, except emergency calls. Phone Allows you to forward your incoming calls to another phone number. You can edit the general settings related to making and receiving calls. Call Options Auto Answer Set how quickly calls are automatically answered during hands-free operation.
Settings Call Waiting To be notified of incoming calls while you have a call in progress, check Provide call waiting notifications, then select Done. Caller ID To display your phone number to the person you are calling, select Everyone. Select No one to hide it. Channels Allows you to receive cell broadcast messages. Fixed Dialing Allows you to limit outgoing calls in certain formats. Networks Displays the current network and allows you to select the manner of selecting networks.
Settings bNew e-mail: You can select the alert tone that sounds when a new e-mail is received. bNew text message: You can select the alert tone that sounds when a new text message is received. bNew voice message: You can select the alert tone that sounds when a new voice message is received. bNew instant message: You can select the alert tone that sounds when a new instant message is received. bNew channel message: You can select the alert tone that sounds when a new channel message is received.
Settings 2. On Home screen layout, select your desired layout option: bSliding Panel: This is the default screen. bSliding Panel Media: Select to display media application shortcuts on the screen. bWindows Simple bWindows Default bLarge Font bWindows Basic bWindows Live Default: Select to include Windows Live search bar and other Windows Live feature shortcuts on screen. 3. To display the recently opened programs when Start is selected, check Show Recent Programs. 4. When finished, select Done.
Settings Clock & Alarm Connections Clock & Alarm can accessed by either of the following: bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Clock & Alarm. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Clock & Alarm. The Connections menu allows you to setup various types of connections such as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Dial-Up, GPRS, and others. Date and Time You can view the time, day of the week and date. 1. From the Clock & Alarm screen, highlight Date and Time, then press the Enter key. 2. Select the Time zone.
Settings 5. When finished, select Connect. Note bIf your Wi-Fi service provider or network administrator sets WEP encryption for network security, you should fill in WEP key in the pop-up window. If WEP encryption is not set, this pop-up window is not shown.If you don’t know the key, you need to ask it to your Wi-Fi service provider or network administrator. 6. Enter the required network key, then select Done. 7.
Settings Bluetooth 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. 2. To turn on/off, highlight the Bluetooth bar, then press the Enter key. 3. To configure settings, select Menu > Bluetooth Settings. The Bluetooth Manager program launches, see “Bluetooth Manager” on page 61. Phone 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Manager. 2. To turn on/off, highlight the Phone bar, then press the Enter key. 3.
Settings To Protect your Phone with a PIN You can protect your phone from unauthorized use by assigning a type of password called a PIN (personal identification number). Obtain the PIN from your wireless service provider; you can change the PIN at a later time. bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More > Security > Enable SIM PIN. To Change your Password bFrom the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More > Security > Change PIN2.
Settings Regional Settings Setup E-mail You can set the regional configuration and style in which numbers, currency, dates and time are displayed on your device. 1. From the Today screen, select Start > Settings > More >Regional Settings. 2. Highlight an option to change settings: bLanguage: Set the language. bLocale: Select the region where you are. bShort date style: Select how you want the numeric date format to appear on screen.
Accessories Package Contents Check to make sure the following items come with your device. Power Adaptor Data Cable Earphones ENGLISH ǠŮǍŸ GW550 User Guide Standard Battery www.lgmobile.com P/N : MMBB0359220 (1.0) User Guide Note bAlways use genuine LG accessories. bFailure to do so may invalidate your warranty. bAccessories may vary in different regions: please check with your regional service company or agent for further information.
GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GW550 / GW550h EN 301 489-01 v1.6.1 / EN 301 489-07 v1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 v.1.2.1 / EN 301 489-19 v1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 EN 300 328 V 1.7.1 EN 60950-1 : 2001 EN 50360:2001/EN62209-1:2006 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1, EN 301 908-2 V3.2.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be dangerous or illegal. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model GW550 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for exposure to radio waves.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Product care and maintenance WARNING Only use batteries, chargers and accessories approved for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous. • Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required. • Keep away from electrical appliances such as TVs, radios, and personal computers.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use • Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips. • Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the phone. • Do not expose the phone to liquid, moisture or humidity • Use the accessories like earphones cautiously. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use • RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your vehicle such as car stereos and safety equipment. • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment. It can cause the air bag to fail or cause serious injury due to improper performance. • If you are listening to music whilst out and about, please ensure that the volume is at a reasonable level so that you are aware of your surroundings.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Potentially explosive atmospheres • Do not use the phone at a refueling point. • Do not use near fuel or chemicals. • Do not transport or store flammable gas, liquid, or explosives in the same compartment of your vehicle as your mobile phone and accessories. In aircraft Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. • Turn your mobile phone off before boarding any aircraft. • Do not use it on the ground without permission from the crew.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use • Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds of times until it needs replacing. • Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximize usability. • Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in high humidity, such as in the bathroom. • Do not leave the battery in hot or cold places, this may deteriorate the battery performance.
Trouble shooting This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most are easy for you to correct yourself. Message Possible causes Possible Solutions SIM error There is no SIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly. Make sure the SIM card is correctly inserted. No network connection Signal weak Outside GSM network area Move towards a window or into an open area.
Message Possible causes Possible Solutions Battery totally empty Temperature out of range Charge battery. Make sure the ambient temperature is right, wait for a while, and then charge again. Check the power supply and connection to the phone. Check the battery contacts and clean them if necessary. Plug in to a different socket or check the voltage. If the charger does not warm up, replace it. Only use original LG accessories. Replace battery.
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ،ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ً ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺘﻀﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ. ﻻ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ،ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ.
ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً ﺳﻬﻼ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ. ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ SIM ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ. ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ GSM ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ .
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ • ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ .ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻟﻴﺲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ LGﻓﻘﻂ. ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ LGﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. • ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ. ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ • ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺔ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ .
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ .ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ،ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ. ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ. • ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ، ﻗﺪ ّ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ. • ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﺫﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ .ﺗﺠﻨّﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ ،ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺭ. • ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒّﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﻊ. • ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ • ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ .ﺍﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻹﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ. • ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ، ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ. • ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ •ﻻ ّ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ .ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﺪ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻣﺮﺍً ﺧﻄﺮﺍً ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ. ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ّﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ّ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ) .(SARﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ GW550 ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ .ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ّ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺼﻤّﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ،ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
GSM 850 / E-GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Quad Band and WCDMA Terminal Equipment GW550 / GW550h EN 301 489-01 v1.6.1 / EN 301 489-07 v1.3.1 / EN 301 489-17 v.1.2.1 / EN 301 489-19 v1.2.1 / EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 EN 300 328 V 1.7.1 EN 60950-1 : 2001 EN 50360:2001/EN62209-1:2006 EN 301 511 V9.0.2 / EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1, EN 301 908-2 V3.2.
ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ( ّ ǠŮǍŸ ENGLISH ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ GW550 www.lgmobile.com )P/N : MMBB0359220 (1.0 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ LGﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً. aﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ. aﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ :ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍً ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ: aﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ :ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ. aﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ. aﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ PIN ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ّ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ) PINﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ PINﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ؛ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ. aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ < ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ .SIM PIN ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ < ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ < ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ .
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ < ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. .2ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .61 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ < ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. .2ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Wi-Fiﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ WEPﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ،ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ WEPﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ،ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ،ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ Wi- Fiﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ. .6ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. .7ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،Wi-Fiﻓﺴﺘﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ) (SSIDﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ. .8ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،Wi-Fiﺣﺪﺩ Wi-Fiﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. .3ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. .4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ Wi-Fiﻭﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ .
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ .ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. .2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ: aﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ :ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ. aﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ aﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ. aﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ. aﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. aﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. aﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺸﻐﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( .ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ.
ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ،ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ .ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ. ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ XT9 ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ < XT9 ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ .XT9 .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ،XT9ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. .4ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ < XT9 ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ .XT9 .2ﺣﺪﺩ XT9ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ XT9 ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﻮﺍﻣﻴﺲ XT9ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ .XT9ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ. ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ. .2ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء .ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ) HH.MM.SS.hhﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(. .3ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ. .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. .4ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ. .5ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. .6ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ /ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ / ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ /ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ aﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ،ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺘﻴﻦ. aﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. aﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎً ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺗﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ. ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ. .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ RSS .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ /ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻟـ RSS .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺧﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺔ. .4ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﺍﻹﺧﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ. .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Microsoft My Phone ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ Microsoft® My Phoneﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ My Phoneﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ http://myphone. .microsoft.com ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Windows XP Professionalﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ Java aﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ،MSN Weatherﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ GPRS SIMﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ Javaﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ Javaﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Javaﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. aﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ GPSExtra ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ GPSﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﺍء .GPS ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ،GPSExtraﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ GPRS SIMﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Adobe Reader LE Adobe Reader® LEﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ PDF (Portable Document ) Formatﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ PDF .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Adobe Reader .LE ً ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ PDFﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ .2ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﺘﺢ. .3ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ < ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ. .4ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ • ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ aﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ .ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ Word Mobile ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺺ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ،ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. aﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ .ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ Word Mobileﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ. ﻳﺠﺐ ً ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ Word ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. aﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ Word Mobileﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ Wordﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Office Mobile < .PowerPoint Mobile .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Office Mobile < .PowerPoint Mobile .2ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ OneNote Mobile PowerPoint Mobile ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ OneNote Mobileﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻣﻀﺎﻓﺔ. ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ،PowerPoint Mobileﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ *.pptﻭ *.ppsﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ PowerPoint ‘97ﻭﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻖ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ،ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ aﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻠﻒ Excel ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ،Excel Mobileﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ :ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻔﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﺻﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝSUM({1= ،؛2؛3؛({4؛ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ؛ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 16384ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑـ !REF# aﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Office Mobile Excel Mobile ﻳﺴﻬّﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ Excel Mobileﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﻨﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ Excelﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ Excel .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Office Mobile < .Excel Mobile .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻠﻒ ،Excelﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ. ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ. ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء .Excel Mobile aﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ: aﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. aﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ :ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. :LG-Timesaﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻩ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ. aﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ/ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .1ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ. .2ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ. .1ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ. .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺍﻛﺔ( ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻣﻦ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. aﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻧﻪ ً ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ. ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ً ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ .1ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ )ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ،ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ 60 ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ(. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. aﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺁﺧﺮ ،ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ .ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. aﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ Windows XP, Service Pack 2ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ 4.5ﻣﻦ ActiveSyncﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻖ. ﺻﻞ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ USBﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ِ .1 .2ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. .3ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑـ USBﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ .PAN .4ﻋﻴّﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ APNﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ. .5ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ. .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 56 ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻌﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻌﻤﻞ ActiveSync ﻣﻊ Windows Media Playerﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ. ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ ActiveSyncﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻓﻲ Windows Media .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ Exchange ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ Exchangeﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً ﺃﻭﻻ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ :ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ Exchangeﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ. .1ﻓﻲ ActiveSyncﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ1 ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء Outlook ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 2ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.1 ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ2 ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء Outlook ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 1ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ً ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.2 ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء Outlook ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 1ﻭﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ2 ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ aﻳﺒﺪﺃ Synchronization Setup Wizard )ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻭﻳﺮﺷﺪﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ .ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ. aﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ Microsoft ،Exchange Serverﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. aﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. aﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ،ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ActiveSyncﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ .Outlook aﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. aﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ Windows Mobile Device Centerﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ Outlookﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ bﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ. ﺛﺒّﺖ ActiveSyncﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ،ActiveSyncﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ActiveSyncﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ Microsoft ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ )(http://www.microsoft.com ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ™Windows Live ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ™ ،Windows Liveﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ™Windows Live .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء < ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ .Windows Live .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. .4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Windows Live™ Search .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Windows .Live .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ aﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ .ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻮﻉ ً )ﻣﺜﻼ GPRSﺃﻭ ActiveSyncﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ .(WiFiﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ. ™Windows Live ﻣﻊ ™ Windows Liveﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺖ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ،Hotmailﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ™Windows Live .
ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ Internet Explorer ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Internet Explorerﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < Internet .Explorer ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ :ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻌﻴّﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ .ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ FMﺗﻔﺤﺼﺎً ﻟﻠﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ، ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔّ ،ﻧﻔﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: aﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ. aﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺤﺺ. ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ّ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺤﺺ. aﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ّ .4ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ :ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. aﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ :ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ. aﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ. aﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. aﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ :ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ .ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎً. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ :ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ. aﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ّ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ(.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻭﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ. ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. aﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ :ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ Windows ،Media Playerﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ. aﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً. aﺣﻮﻝ :ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ Windows Media ،Playerﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: aﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. aﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ. aﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ MMS ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. .1ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ. .2ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ Outlookﺃﻭ (MMS ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ. .
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ aﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ :ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. .4ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻏﺒﺎﺷﺎً. .5ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ، ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ. aﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ . ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ. .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ < ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ < ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺗﻲ < ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺠﻤّﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺐ ّ ﻭﻳﻨﻈﻤﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻔﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ. ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ .
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ: aﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ. aﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ. aﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ. aﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ :ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ّ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ.
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: aﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ. aﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ. aﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ ،MMSﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ. aﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ .3ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ّ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ .ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ < ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ،ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ Windows .Media Player .
ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ. ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ/ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ. aﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ. .3ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﻱ .ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. .4ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻧﻬﺎء. ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ .
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ّ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ: • ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ Outlookﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ ،ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ Exchange Serverﻋﺒﺮ .ActiveSync • ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻪ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ . • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ،ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺠﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ. aﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺠﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ،VPNﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. .6ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ/ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ. .7ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ .6ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. .7ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ. ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟـ Outlook ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ®Microsoft Outlookﺃﻭ .®Exchange Server ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﺜﻞ Hotmailﻭ Yahoo!Mailﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ.
ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ aﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺪء < ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! aﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ .ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ. aﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ. .4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ. ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ! bﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻲ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ. .5ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ aﺑﻼ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ. aﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. aﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. aﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ :ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﻠﺒﺘﻬﺎ. ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ .1ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ aﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ. .1ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ .3G .2ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ .ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ. aﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ. aﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ.
ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. .2ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ. .4ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. .5ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ. ّ ﻭﻳﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ aﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﻌﻴًّﻨﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ،ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻴّﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .
ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،ﻓﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺪءﺍً ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻪ. ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ. ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ،ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ .
ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ .ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ: .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. .2ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎءّ ،ﻧﻔﺬ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: aﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻱ. ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ < ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ < ﺍﻻﺳﻢ. aﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ.
ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ّ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻨﻚ ﻭﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﻢ .ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ. ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء :ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ Outlookﻭﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Outlook ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ Outlookﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ XT9 ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ XT9ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﻘﺘﺮﺡ ﺍﻹﻣﻼء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ،ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ،XT9ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ + Fnﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ XT9ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ. ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ XT9 .1ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ. .2ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ،ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ. .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ aﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Fnﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻖ. ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ Fnﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ. ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Fnﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ. ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. aﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ aﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺣﺮﻑ.
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ 22 ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺆﻗﺖ. Windows Live ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ™.Windows Live ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ. MSN Money ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ MSN Moneyﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ. MSN Weather ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ ﻋﺒﺮ .MSN Weather Search Widget ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ .Live Search ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ.
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ Marketplace ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ. Microsoft My Phone ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ My Phone ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ .http://myphone.microsoft.com Adobe Reader LE ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ *.pdfﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ AGPS ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻢ. ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ. ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺷﺒﻜﺔ.
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ 20 ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ. ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻋﻴﺪ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ. ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. Internet Explorer ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ. ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ّ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﻣﻬﺎﻣﻚ. ActiveSync ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ.
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ. aﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء aﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺑﺪء ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺪء. aﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ. ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ. aﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ.
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ: ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ .ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ .ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ.
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ.
ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ،ﻭﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ. ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ Wi-Fi ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ( aﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ( aﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ.
ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ. ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ: • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ. ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ: aﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ :ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء.
ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSD .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSD ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ. .3ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ. ﺣﺮﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSD ّ .4 ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ. .5ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻺﻗﻔﺎﻝ. B A ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ! C ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSDﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻤّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ .ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ.
ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ! aﻻ ﺗُﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ. aﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ .ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ. aﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻙ. aﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ USBﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ.
ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ).(A .2ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ).(B A B ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ... aﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺎﺭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ . aﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ . ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ... aﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. aﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺗﺘﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .
ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIM ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ّ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ. ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺏ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﻣﻼﻣﺴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻬﺎ .ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺬﺭﺍً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ .SIM ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .1ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ.
ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ microSDﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ. ﺗﺼﺤﺐ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ. ﻟﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ .1ﺿﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻣﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ. ﻭﺣﺮﻙ .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﻬﺎﻡ ّ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ. ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ .
ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ GW550 ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ aﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ. aﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ. ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﻣﻮﺻﻞ USB ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ USBﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ،ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺡ LGﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ GW550 ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ .1ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ aﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ. aﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ .ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻟﻬﺎ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ. .2ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ .3ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .4ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ :ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ. .
ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ GW550 ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .1ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ .12ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ .2ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ .13ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ .3ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .14ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ .4ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .15ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ .16ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء .17ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ .5ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ .6ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ .7ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ .18ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ .19ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ .8ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ .9ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ .20ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ .21ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ .
ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻬﺎﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ GW550 Windows Mobileﻣﻦ .LG ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ .ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ .ﺇﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻨﻮﺡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ.
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ76 ............................................... ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ 76 ..................................... ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ76 .............................................. ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً 76 .................... ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ّ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ 76 ........................................ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ77 .................................................. ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ 77 ................................................ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ 78 .......................................
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ58 ....................................... ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﻛﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ59 ................................ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ59 ............................................... ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ60 .................................... ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ60 ..................................... ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻲ60 ...................................... 61 ..................................... Office Mobile 61 ......................................Excel Mobile 63 .............................
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ30 ................................................. ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ31 ........................................... ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻔﻴﺔ 31 ....................................... ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ 31 ......................................... ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ32.................................... ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 32 ................................................. ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ32 .................................. ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ32 .........................................
ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ6........................................ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ 7.........................GW550 ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ10...................... ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ SIMﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ 10 ........................ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ10 .............................................. ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ 11 ......................................... SIM ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ12 ....................................... ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ 13 .............. microSD ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ15 ..................................
GW550 ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ .LG GW550 Windows Mobile ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ .LG Electronics ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ .
